2012 buick verano owner manual m - general …...see malfunction indicator lamp on page 5‑13. m....

Black plate (1,1)Buick Verano Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Buick Verano Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-30

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-28Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-34Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-52

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73


2012 Buick Verano Owner Manual M

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-14

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, BUICK, theBUICK Emblem, and VERANO aretrademarks and/or service marksof General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for BuickMotor Division wherever it appearsin this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 delangue françaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20916303 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-21Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-21Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-22Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-22Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

B. Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21.

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

E. Keyless Access Ignition. SeeIgnition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑16 or IgnitionPositions (Keyless Access) onpage 9‑18.

Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34. StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑36.

F. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6‑3.

G. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4.

H. Infotainment Display Screen.

I. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

Trunk Release. See TrunkRelease on page 1‑6.

J. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10‑32.

L. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

M. Cruise Control on page 9‑38.

N. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

O. Horn on page 5‑3.

P. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

Q. Ignition Switch. See IgnitionPositions (Key Access) onpage 9‑16 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18.

R. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑28.

S. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7(If Equipped).

T. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Satellite Radio on page 7‑17(If Equipped).


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle.

RKE without Remote Start Shown

Press the button to extend the key.The key can be used for all locks.This key is also used for theignition, if the vehicle does not havepushbutton start.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V : Press and hold to open thetrunk.

7 : Press and release one time tolocate the vehicle. Press and holdfor at least two seconds to soundthe panic alarm. Press again tocancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.


In Brief 1-5

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the door fromoutside the vehicle, press K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or use the key in thedriver door.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Push down on the door lock knobon the top of the door.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑10 foradditional information.

Power Door Locks

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30 for more information.


1-6 In Brief

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, press8 on the

center stack orV on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

For more information see:. Trunk on page 2‑12.. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑3.

Windows

The power window switches arelocated on the driver door. Eachpassenger door has a switch thatcontrols only that window.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it.

See Power Windows on page 2‑18for additional information.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.


1-8 In Brief

To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Rear Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded.

For detailed instructions, see RearSeats on page 3‑8.


In Brief 1-9

Heated Seats

Uplevel Automatic Climate ControlSystem Shown, Other Automatic

Systems Similar

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the climatecontrol panel. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑12.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑39.


1-10 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystem

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions.No other airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑25 for important information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

1. Turn the selector switch toL (Left) or R (Right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. See Folding Mirrors onpage 2‑17.

Interior Mirrors

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Manual Rearview Mirror

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind. SeeManual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑17.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑17.


In Brief 1-11

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console.

( : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : Press to turn the lamps onautomatically when a door isopened.

' : Press to turn on the domelamps.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are located inthe headliner.

# or$ : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.


1-12 In Brief

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the left ofthe steering column on theinstrument panel.

D : Move the thumbwheel up ordown and hold, to brighten or dimthe instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedto the left of the steering column onthe instrument panel.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic lamp control offor on again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, sidemarker lamps, andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.


In Brief 1-13

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever toselect the wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.

3 : Move the lever to3 , thenturn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

9 : Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.

3 : Briefly move the wiper leverdown for a single wipe or hold downfor several wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, andventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.


1-14 In Brief

Climate Control System

A. Temperature Control

B. Air Delivery Modes

C. Fan Control

D. Recirculation

E. Air Conditioning

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Defrost


In Brief 1-15

Dual Automatic Climate Control System

English Shown, Metric Similar

A. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

B. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

C. Air Delivery Modes

D. Heated Steering Wheel(If Equipped)

E. Recirculation

F. Air Conditioning

G. Fan Controls

H. Rear Window Defogger

I. Defrost

J. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Dual Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

Driver Shift Control (DSC)allows you to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+) or(−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC).

See Manual Mode on page 9‑30.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.


1-16 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O /VOL: Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND or SRCE: Press tochoose between FM, AM, or XM™,if equipped.

TUNE/MENU: Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

s © : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

¨\ : Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO (Information): Press to showavailable information about thecurrent station or track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑9.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beep isheard.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑12.

Setting the Clock(Radio with CD)

The clock menu can be only beused with the radio on while inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings or press H.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press TUNE/MENU to select thenext number.

5. To save the time and returnto the Time Settings menu,press / BACK at any time orpress the TUNE/MENU knobafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press TUNE/MENU to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

The clock menu can be only beused with the radio on while inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.


In Brief 1-17

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options or pressH. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll through the availablesetup features. Press TUNE/MENU or press the Time screenbutton to display other optionswithin that feature.

2. Press + or − to increase ordecrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

See Clock on page 5‑4 for moreinformation.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ satellite radiotuner and a valid XM satellite radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑17.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB drives may beconnected, depending on the audiosystem.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑26.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.


1-18 In Brief

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) on page 7‑31 or Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑30 orBluetooth (Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑35.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press the thumbwheel toselect an audio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off. An indicator lightwill turn on or off in the instrumentcluster.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up toresume to a previously set speed orto accelerate.


In Brief 1-19

SET/−: Move the thumbwheel downto set a speed and activate cruisecontrol or to make the vehicledecelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑38.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation system manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item when it isdisplayed.

B. w / x : Use the thumbwheelto scroll through the items ineach menu.

C. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate control and oneon the rear of the center floorconsole. These outlets are poweredwhen the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑24.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.


1-20 In Brief

Sunroof

For vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑24 for more information.

Open/Close: Press switch (A) tothe first detent position.

Express Open/Close: Pressswitch (A) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

Automatic Tilt/Close: Press therear of switch (B) to vent thesunroof. Press the front ofswitch (B) to close the sunroof vent.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

See Sunroof on page 2‑20 for moreinformation.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control,

press and release g locatedbelow the infotainment systemscreen. i illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑28.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑34.


In Brief 1-21

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdg until g and i illuminate andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑28.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑36.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑45.


1-22 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enter theVehicle Information Menu. Usethe thumbwheel to scroll throughthe menu items until you reachREMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑43. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑41.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


In Brief 1-23

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-252-1112

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Buick, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6 for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar Advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: buick.com (click on“Owners,” then “ManageMy Buick/Owners Login”)

Canada: buickowner.ca

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.


1-24 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation (KeyAccess) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with theRKE transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do notleave the RKE transmitter in avehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a key accessvehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.



Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

If the vehicle has an ignition and itbecomes difficult to turn the key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe transmitter functions will workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.



RKE without Remote Start Shown

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “AutoDoor Unlock” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “RemoteUnlock Light Feedback” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators mayflash and/or the horn may soundto indicate locking. See “RemoteLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold to open the trunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain or the vehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press tooperate the remote start feature.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8 for additional information.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition, if equipped.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittershould be within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor or trunk being opened.



Keyless Unlocking

With the RKE transmitter within1 m (3 ft), approach the door andpull the handle to unlock and openthe door. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause all ofthe doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened, see“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Lock Sensor

When all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on thedoor handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.

The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmittersno longer work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersmatched to it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must beoff and all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Place the recognizedtransmitter(s) near you.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.



The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays READY FORREMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket withthe buttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center consolecupholder. The cupholder linerwill need to be removed toaccess the transmitter pocket.Use your finger or a tool inthe notch at the rear of thecupholders to remove the liner.See Cupholders on page 4‑2.

4. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ignition for at least10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to fivetransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DICdisplays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.

The DIC display will again showREMOTE LEARN PENDING,PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.



4. Place the new transmitter intothe transmitter pocket withthe buttons facing up. Thetransmitter pocket is locatedinside the center consolecupholder. The cupholder linerwill need to be removed toaccess the transmitter pocket.Use your finger or a tool inthe notch at the rear of thecupholders to remove the liner.See Cupholders on page 4‑2.

5. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press andhold the ignition for at least10 seconds to exitprogramming mode.

Starting the Vehicle witha Low Transmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayed atthis time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the cupholder liner fromthe center console cupholder.See Cupholders on page 4‑2.

2. Place the transmitter in thetransmitter pocket with thebuttons facing up.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ignition control.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for additionalinformation about the vehicle'skeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.



Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. SeeKey and Lock Messages onpage 5‑27.

The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. A vehicle withoutautomatic climate control will defaultto the last used heating or coolingmode. Once the key is turned toON/RUN, the climate control systemwill turn on at the setting the vehiclewas last set to. If the vehicle hasheated seats, they may come onduring a remote start. See HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑7 for moreinformation.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2‑3 for additionalinformation.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.



When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Start the vehicle before driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1–3 while the engine is stillrunning. The remote start can beextended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,is allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition (key

access) or if the key is in thevehicle (keyless access).

. The hood is not closed.

. The hazard warning flashersare on.

. The malfunction indicator lampis on.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts, or asingle remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock the door fromoutside the vehicle, press K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter or use the key in thedriver door.

From inside the vehicle with thedoors locked, pull once on the doorhandle to unlock it, and a secondtime to open it.

Push down on the door lock knobon the top of the door.

Manually locking the driver dooralso automatically locks all otherdoors.

For more information see:. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation on page 2‑3.. Power Door Locks on page 2‑11.. Vehicle Personalization on

page 5‑30.



Power Door Locks

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

See “Power Door Locks” in VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

The doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of P (Park).

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door Unlock

The doors will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park).

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Pressv { to activate the safetylocks. The indicator light willilluminate.

This switch also disables the powerwindow controls on the rear doors.

Pressv { again to deactivate thesafety locks and rear window.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.



Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

Trunk Release

To open the trunk, press8.

Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk, pressV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.



Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk lid. The releasehandle can be accessed by foldingthe rear seatback. See Rear Seatson page 3‑8. Pull the release handleto open the trunk from the inside.

To close the trunk, use the pullhandle.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, press Q on theRKE transmitter.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the trunk without setting off thealarm. The system rearms when thetrunk is closed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Approach the vehicle with theRKE transmitter (keylessaccess).

. Start the engine.

The alarm automatically disarms.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-inoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, amessage will appear on the DIC.See Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages on page 5‑28 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer Operation(Key Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarms



the system. Only the correct keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key.

If the engine still does not start withthe other key, the vehicle needsservice. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be damaged. Seeyour dealer who can service thetheft-deterrent system and have anew key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Immobilizer Operation(Keyless Access)This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the transmitterleaves the vehicle.

The immobilization system isdisarmed when the ignition button ispushed in and a valid transmitter isfound in the vehicle.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

The system has one or moretransmitters matched to animmobilizer control unit in yourvehicle. Only a correctly matchedtransmitter will start the vehicle.If the transmitter is ever damaged,you may not be able to start yourvehicle.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.



If the RKE transmitter appears to beundamaged, try another transmitter.Or, you may try placing thetransmitter in the transmitter pocketlocated in the center console. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

If the engine does not start withthe other transmitter or when thetransmitter is in the pocket in thecenter console, your vehicle needsservice. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new transmitterprogrammed to the vehicle.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

1. Turn the selector switch to L(Left) or R (Right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjust themirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to9 todeselect the mirror.



Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have heatedmirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with a manual rearviewmirror, push the tab forward fordaytime use and pull it for nighttimeuse to avoid glare from theheadlamps from behind.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See a dealer for moreinformation about OnStar and howto subscribe to it. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

For vehicles with an automaticdimming rearview mirror, the mirrorwill automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps from behind.The dimming feature comes onwhen the vehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See a dealerfor more information about OnStarand how to subscribe to it. SeeOnStar Overview on page 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).

Power Windows

The power window switches locatedon the driver door control all fourwindows. Each passenger door hasa switch that controls only thatwindow.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the front of the switchup to raise it.



The switches work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑24.

Express Window Operation

Windows with an express-up ordown feature allow the frontwindows to be lowered or raisedwithout holding the switch. Rearwindows only have express-down.Pull a window switch up or push itdown all the way, release it, andthe window goes up or downautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, or isnot working, the windows with theexpress-up feature will need to be

reprogrammed for the feature towork. Before reprogramming,replace or recharge the vehicle'sbattery.

To program each front window:

1. The ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or in RAP.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Rear Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position. Therear door locks will also be disabledand only operate from the driverdoor. This feature only works whenthe ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or in RAP.



Pressv { to activate the rearwindow lockout and door locks.The indicator light comes on whenactivated.

Pressv { to deactivate thelockout.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

For vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑24 for more information.

Open/Close: Press switch (A) tothe first detent position.

Express Open/Close: Pressswitch (A) to the second detentposition and release. To stop themovement, press the switch again.

Automatic Tilt/Close: Press therear of switch (B) to vent thesunroof. Press the front ofswitch (B) to close the sunroof vent.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof. Thesunroof will then return to thefull-open or vent position.

The sunroof cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.



Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the front ofswitch (A) or (B). The sunroof closeswithout the safety function. To stopthe movement, release the switch.

Initializing

After a power failure, the sunroofoperation may be limited. Have thesystem initialized by a dealertechnician.

Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-20When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-29

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-30Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-36Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-37Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-49


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.



Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions. Theheight of the head restraint can beadjusted. Pull the head restraint upto raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top ofthe seatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑39.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.



Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.



. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5 formore information.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to access thelever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatback inplace.




To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Uplevel Automatic Climate ControlSystem Shown, Other Automatic

Systems Similar

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the climatecontrol panel. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press M or L to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, theheated seats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the control to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.



The heated seat indicator lights onthe control do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑8 and VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30 formore information.

Rear SeatsEither side of the rear seatback canbe folded.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To fold the rear seatbacks:

1. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand place the front seatback inthe upright position.

2. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on top of the seatback.

3. Reach under the safety belt andpull the lever to unlock theseatback.



A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

4. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for theother seatback, if desired.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

To raise the seatback:

1. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on the top of theseatback.

2. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward until it clicks into place.Keep the safety belts clear of theseatback and untwisted.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety beltmay lock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, let thebelt go back all the way andstart again.

{ WARNING

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always pull forward on the top ofthe seatback at the area of thelatch to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked intoposition.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for theother seatback, if necessary.

Keep the seat in the upright lockedposition when not in use.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑10 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the



safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑31 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑33.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.



. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.



Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑17.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑11.

Press the release button and movethe height adjuster to the desiredposition. The adjuster can be movedup by pushing the slide/trim up.After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.

They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal andnear frontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑17.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through the dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.



There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat. To install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

5. To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Store the guide in its storagepocket on the seatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.



Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system

from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑10 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑17.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.



See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver and thepassenger seated directlybehind the driver.

. A seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right frontpassenger and the passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With knee airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the lowerportion of the instrument panel.



With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑22.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blinkof an eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑31 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑33.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The driver and front outboardpassenger seat‐mounted sideimpact airbags are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat‐mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.



{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an object

straight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal impactsthat exceed a predetermineddeployment threshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbags



inflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑18.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the sideof the vehicle that is struck. Bothroof‐rail airbags will inflate when

either side of the vehicle is struck orif the sensing system predicts thatthe vehicle is about to roll over onits side, or in a severe frontalimpact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑20.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement theprotection provided by safetybelts by distributing the force ofthe impact more evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof‐rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof‐rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.



But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑22 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑20.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

The words ON and OFF will bevisible during the system check.If you use remote start, if equipped,

to start the vehicle, you may not seethe system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions. Noother airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.



We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbags are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbags to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbags areactive.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑49or Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) on page 3‑46.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is stilllit, turn the vehicle off. Thenslightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.



The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbags for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child's seating posture andbody build. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. Use thefollowing steps to allow the systemto detect that person and enable thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position forone minute after the on indicatoris lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑29 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.



A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11 forimportant safety information.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑13.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and



diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort enhancing pador device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could also

interfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑25.

If the vehicle has rollover roof‐railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑54 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑4.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑20. See your dealer forservice.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.



Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be

sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

distributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑39 formore information. Children can be

endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website

to locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.



We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑25 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraintin a rear seating position, studythe instructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.



Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin the vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑37 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑37.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired rear outboardseating position.



1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard rear seatingpositions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of thechild restraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head RestraintRemoval andReinstallation” at theend of this section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the top tether anchorcover to expose the anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraint androute the single tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

. If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,raise the head restraint androute the tether under thehead restraint and aroundthe head restraint posts.



. If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the singletether over the seatback.

. If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position and thehead restraint has beenremoved, route the dualtether over the seatback.

. If you are using a singletether in the rear centerseating position, route thesingle tether over theheadrest.



. If you are using a dualtether in the rear centerseating position, route thedual tether over theheadrest.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attemptto move it side to side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑8 for additionalinformation.

2. Press both buttons on thehead restraint posts at the sametime, and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.



To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

3. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑39 for top tether anchorlocations.



Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑37.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑39.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.



To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it. If thehead restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for additionalinformation on installing the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑37.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag under

certain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑25 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑25 for additionalinformation.



If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑39 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑39 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag, theoff indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑25 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

Pull down to open it.

Glove Box

Lift up on the lever to open it.

The glovebox features a penholder (A).

The intermediate shelf (B) can beremoved by pulling on thefront edge.


4-2 Storage

To reinstall the shelf, slide it into theside guides (A) and push back untilit engages into the rear panel (B).

Cupholders

There are two cupholders in thecenter console with a removableliner. To remove the liner, lift up onthe notch on the underside of therear of the cupholder.

Rear Seat

There are two cupholders in the rearseat armrest. Lower the rear seatarmrest to access the cupholders.

Center Console Storage

The armrest is adjustable, lift thelever to move it forward or rearward.


Storage 4-3

The armrest must be in the rearwardposition to open it. Lift the lever andthen lift up on the armrest to accessthe storage area.

There is a USB port and auxiliaryinput jack inside the storage area.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑26for more information.


4-4 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Electric Parking BrakeLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-17Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-17

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-20Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-25Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-26Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-27Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-29Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-29Window Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-30


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Lift the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


Some audio controls can beadjusted at the steering wheel.

b / g (Push to Talk): Forvehicles with a Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system, press to

interact with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑31 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑35, OnStarOverview on page 14‑1, or theseparate navigation manual formore information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Source): Press to selectan audio source.

Move the thumbwheel up or down toselect the next or previous favoriteradio station, CD, or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.



Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Forvehicles with a heated steeringwheel, press to turn it on or off.A light on the button displays whenthe feature is turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheel padto sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theright side of the steering column.With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.

3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Move the lever to3 , then turn theband up for more frequent wipes ordown for less frequent wipes.

9 (Off): Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Mist): Briefly move the wiperlever down for a single wipe or holddown for several wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theyare frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑22.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,or3 , they will immediately stop.



If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to9 before the driver dooris opened, or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF during a windshield wash, thewipers will stop when they reach thebase of the windshield.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

The washer and wipers will continueuntil the lever is released or themaximum wash time is reached.

When the windshield wiper lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated.

If the washer fluid is low amessage may display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), seeWasher Fluid Messages on

page 5‑29. For information onfilling the windshield washer fluidreservoir, seeWasher Fluid onpage 10‑16.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThere is a compass display in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Thecompass receives its heading andother information from the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak, and vehicle speedinformation.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.

See Backglass Antenna onpage 7‑21 and Satellite RadioAntenna on page 7‑21 for thelocation of the vehicle's antennas.The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again. SeeCompass Messages on page 5‑25for more information on themessages that may be displayedfor the compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. The clock menu can beonly be used with the radio on whilein ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.



See Operation on page 7‑9 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

Setting the Clock(Radio with CD)

To set the time:


2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toadjust the highlighted number.

4. Press TUNE/MENU to select thenext number.

5. To save the time and returnto the Time Settings menu,press / BACK at any time orpress the TUNE/MENU knobafter adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press TUNE/MENU to select the12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

The clock is in the center stackdisplay.

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options or pressH. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll through the availablesetup features. Press TUNE/MENU or press the Time screenbutton to display other optionswithin that feature.

2. Press + or − to increase ordecrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.


Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the instrument panelbelow the climate control and oneon the rear of the center floorconsole. These outlets are poweredwhen the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until the driverdoor is opened within 10 minutes ofturning off the vehicle. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑24.



Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessoriesmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑52.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.

AshtraysFor vehicles with a removableashtray, the ashtray can be placedinto the front console cupholders.

To open the ashtray, lift the lid of theashtray. After using, close the lid.

To empty the ashtray for cleaning,slightly turn the upper part of theashtray counterclockwise andremove it.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge tells you about how muchfuel you have left in your tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

When the fuel is low, amessage may appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC), and achime will sound. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑27 for moreinformation.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with your fuelgauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge


This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward theshaded area, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

For more information seePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑18.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑25 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF for severalseconds as a system check. If youuse remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle, you may not seethe system check. Then, afterseveral seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFFto let you know the status of thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator,it means that the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag are allowed to inflate.

If the word OFF is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.



If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment.

This light comes on when thevehicle is placed in ON/RUN for keyaccess or Service Only Mode forkeyless access, as a check to showit is working. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions (Key Access) on

page 9‑16 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 formore information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe dealer technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,

and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions and



could damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If the vehicle is towing a trailer,

reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled as soon as it ispossible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑44. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑41.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. Forthe inspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).



The DLC is under the instrumentpanel next to the steering wheel.See your dealer if assistance isneeded.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on while the vehicle is running.The vehicle is in ON/RUN forkeyed access, or service onlymode for keyless access and themalfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on. See your dealer forassistance in verifying properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not been

completely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑71.

Electric Parking BrakeLight

The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)light should come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon, have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

The parking brake status lightcomes on when the brake isapplied. If the light continuesflashing after the parking brake isreleased, or while driving, there is aproblem with the EPB system.A message may also display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑25 for more information.

If the light does not come on,or remains flashing, see your dealer.

If this light comes on, there is aproblem with a system on thevehicle that is causing the EPB towork at a reduced level. The vehiclecan still be driven, but should betaken to a dealer as soon aspossible. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32 for more information.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.



If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑15.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑25 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑36 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑36 for moreinformation

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak or Traction ControlSystem (TCS) indicator/warninglight comes on briefly when theengine is started.



If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑36 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑34 formore information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑24 for more information.Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑44 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑46 formore information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.



Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light comes onand a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.

For more information on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 5‑27.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operation(Key Access) on page 2‑14 orImmobilizer Operation (KeylessAccess) on page 2‑15 for moreinformation.



High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

The lamps on reminder light comeson when the lights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑38 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

For vehicles equipped with this light,it comes on when a door is open ornot securely latched. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed. See Door Ajar Messages onpage 5‑26 for more information.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC)displays information about thevehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑24 for more information. Allmessages appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

On some models, the DIC may havesome warning lights or indicatorsshown in the top portion of thedisplay. See Warning Lights,Gauges, and Indicators on page 5‑7for more information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30 formore information.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal lever,located on the left side of thesteering wheel. The DIC displaystrip, fuel, and vehicle systeminformation, and warning messagesif a system problem is detected.

The bottom of the DIC displayshows the position of the shift leverand the odometer. It may also showthe direction the vehicle is driving.

In cold weather the DIC display maychange slowly. This is normal andwill move more quickly as thevehicle's interior temperature rises.

DIC Buttons

A. SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Press toset or clear the menu item whenit is displayed.

B. w / x (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will moveacross the bottom of the pageas you scroll through the items.This shows where each page isin the menu.

C. MENU: Press to get to theTrip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.



Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Trip/Fuel Menu isdisplayed. Usew / x to scrollthrough the following menu items:. Digital Speedometer. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Instantaneous Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Navigation. Blank Display

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Trip 1 and Trip 2

These displays show the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). Average fueleconomy is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset. The average fuel

economy can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average FuelEconomy display is showing.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). The instantaneous fueleconomy reflects only the currentfuel economy and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange. Unlike average economy,this display cannot be reset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.



Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Navigation

This display is used for theNavigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the navigationmanual, if the vehicle hasnavigation, for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until the Vehicle InformationMenu is displayed. Usew / x toscroll through the following menuitems:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Battery Voltage

Unit

Movew / x to switch betweenmetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. This will change thedisplays on the cluster and DIC toeither metric or English (US)measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or poundsper square inch (psi). See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑45 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑46 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.



See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑27. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7. In additionto the Engine Oil Life Systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay must be reset after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theRemaining Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theEngine Oil Life System, press SET/CLR while the Remaining Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

Battery Voltage

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read Battery Voltage15.0 Volts. The vehicle's chargingsystem regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery. The batteryvoltage can fluctuate while viewingthis information on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑12 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message

Compass

The vehicle has a compass displayin the DIC. See Compass onpage 5‑4 for more information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action that may be neededto correct a condition. Multiplemessages may display one after theother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing SET/CLR. The messagesthat require immediate action cannotbe cleared until that action isperformed. All messages should betaken seriously and clearing themessages does not correct theproblem.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑20 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑18.

PRESS BRAKE PEDAL TORELEASE PARK BRAKE

This message is displayed if youattempt to release the electricparking brake without the brakepedal applied. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑32 for more information.

RELEASE PARK BRAKESWITCH

This message is displayed if theelectric parking brake is appliedwhile the vehicle is in motion.

Release it before you attempt todrive. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32 for more information.

SERVICE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed whenthere is a problem with the electricparking brake. See Parking Brakeon page 9‑32 for more information.Take the vehicle to your dealer.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.



Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thedriver door is open. Close the doorcompletely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thedriver side rear door is open. Closethe door completely.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thefront passenger door is open. Closethe door completely.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message may display when thepassenger side rear door is open.Close the door completely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑13.

ENGINE OVERHEATED— IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED—STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.



HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑16.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

OIL PRESSURE LOW— STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.

If this message is on, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination. Theperformance may be reduced thenext time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with keyless access.



See “Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.If this message appears, try to resetthe system. Stop; turn off the enginefor at least 15 seconds; then startthe engine again. If this messagestill comes on, it means there is aproblem. See your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Tire Messages

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑18.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.



See Tires on page 10‑36, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10, and TirePressure on page 10‑44.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the SET/CLR button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑21.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑46 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑46 for more information.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT— IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message may display when thewasher fluid level is low. Forinformation on filling the washerfluid, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑16.



Window Messages

OPEN, THEN CLOSE DRIVERWINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑18 for more information.

OPEN, THEN CLOSEPASSENGER WINDOW

This message is displayed when thewindow needs to be reprogrammed.If the vehicle's battery has beenrecharged or disconnected, you willneed to reprogram each frontwindow for the express-up feature towork. See Power Windows onpage 2‑18 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

TUNE/MENU: Press the center ofthis knob to enter the menus andselect menu items. Turn the knob toscroll through the menus.

/ BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings. Pressthe CONFIG button until Vehicleis highlighted on vehicles with anavigation system only.

3. Press the center of the TUNE/MENU knob to select the VehicleSettings menu. The key must bein the ON/RUN position.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/ Unlock/ Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the menu. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to select it. Eachof the menus is detailed in thefollowing information.

Vehicles with a navigation systemwill display a checkmark to indicatethis feature is on.



Climate and Air Quality

If equipped, select the Climate andAir Quality menu and the followingmay be displayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. This featuresets the climate control fan speed tomaintain the interior temperature.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Fan Speed is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight High, Medium, or Low.Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

On vehicles with remote start andheated seats, the heated seats canbe set to on or off.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Start Auto Heat Seats ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight On or Off.Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Defog

When turned on and high humidityis detected, the climate controlsystem may adjust to outsideair supply and turn on the airconditioner or the heater. The fanspeed may slightly increase to helpprevent fogging. When highhumidity is no longer detected, thesystem will return to its prioroperation.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Defog is highlighted to openthe menu. Turn the knob to highlightOn or Off. Press / BACK to confirmthe selection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Rear Defog

When on, this feature turns on therear defogger at vehicle start whenthe interior temperature is cold andfog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Rear Defog is highlighted toopen the menu. Turn the knob tohighlight On or Off. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and ChimeVolume will be displayed.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.



Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenChime Volume is highlighted. Turnthe knob to select Normal or High.Press / BACK to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

If equipped, select the Collision/Detection Systems menu and ParkAssist will be displayed.

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature, audible only, to beturned on or off.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenPark Assist is highlighted. Turn theknob to select On or Off. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exit Lighting. Vehicle Locator Lights

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the TUNE/MENU knobwhen Exit Lighting is highlighted.Turn the knob to select Off,30 Seconds, 1 Minute, or 2 Minutes.Press / BACK to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. When on, theheadlamps and back-up lamps willflash when K is pressed.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenVehicle Locator Lights is highlightedto open the menu. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to highlight On or Off.Press TUNE/MENU to select On orOff. Press / BACK to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Auto Door Unlock. Delay Door Lock. Open Door Anti Lock Out. Passive Door Unlock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenAuto Door Unlock is highlighted.Turn the knob to select All Doors,Driver Door, or Off. Press the TUNE/MENU knob to confirm and go backto the last menu. Press / BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Delay Door Lock

When on, this feature will delaythe locking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.



Press either the power lock buttonor Q on the RKE transmitter twice tooverride the delayed locking featureand immediately lock all of thedoors.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenDelay Door Lock is highlighted toselect On or Off. Press / BACK toreturn to the last menu.

Open Door Anti Lock Out

When on, all doors will lock. Thedriver door will then unlock if doorlocking is requested while the driverdoor is open, and disable the DelayDoor Lock feature.

Even when this feature is off, thedriver is protected from accidentallockouts when the key is in theignition.

If Off is selected, the Open DoorAnti Lock Out feature maybe enabled through an additionalmenu selection.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenOpen Door Anti Lock Out ishighlighted to select On or Off.Press / BACK to return to thelast menu.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorsare unlocked by pressing button onthe outside door handle. Press theTUNE/MENU knob when PassiveDoor Unlock is highlighted. Turn theknob to select All Doors or DriverDoor. Press the TUNE/MENU knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Lock/ Unlock/ Start

Select Remote Lock Unlock, Startand the following will be displayed(depending on the system):. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Unlock Feedback

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knobwhen Remote Lock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectLights and Horn, Lights Only, HornOnly, or Off. Press the TUNE/MENUknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.



Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenDoor Unlock is highlighted. Turn theknob to select All Doors or DriverDoor Only. When set to Driver DoorOnly, the driver door will unlock thefirst time K is pressed and all doors

will unlock when K is pressed asecond time. When set to All Doors,all of the doors will unlock at the firstpress of K. Press the TUNE/MENUknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Unlock Feedback

If equipped, this allows selection ofwhat type of feedback is given whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Press the TUNE/MENU knob whenRemote Unlock Feedback ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the TUNE/MENUknob to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Return to Factory Settings?

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all vehicle personalization tothe default settings. Turn the knobto select Yes or No. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedto the left of the steering column onthe instrument panel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps

The exterior lamp control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic lamp controloff or on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps


6-2 Lighting

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5‑20.

HeadlampHigh/Low-BeamChanger

23 (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signal/lane change lever away from youand release, to turn the highbeams on.

To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh-beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.


Lighting 6-3

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system makes thelow‐beam headlamps come onat a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the

ON/RUN mode.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow‐beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamps control to O andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, the DRL cannot beturned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamps control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered,or the headlamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.


6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton located on the instrumentpanel above the climate controlsystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press andmomentarily hold again to turnthe flashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Have the bulbsreplaced. If the bulb is not burnedout, check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑28 formore information.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is located on theoutboard side of the instrumentpanel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

# (Front Fog Lamps): Press toturn the fog lamps on or off. Anindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thefog lamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high‐beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high‐beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the left ofthe steering column on theinstrument panel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold,to brighten or dim the instrumentpanel controls and infotainmentdisplay screen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is inthe door position.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console.

( (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.


6-6 Lighting

H (Door): Press to turn the lampson automatically when a door isopened.

' (On): Press to turn on thedome lamps.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are located inthe headliner.

# or$ (Reading Lamps): Pressthe button near each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, and most of the interiorlamps turn on briefly when K ispressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. After about30 seconds the exterior lamps turnoff, and then the dome andremaining interior lights will dim tooff. Entry lighting can be disabledmanually by changing the ignitionout of the OFF position, or bypressing the RKE transmitterQ button.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.

The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lamps anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

The exit lighting feature canbe changed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑30.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lamps are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Backglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-21Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-21Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-30Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention to infotainmenttasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.


7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑24 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) tothe infotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or movedto a different vehicle.

Overview (Radio with CD)

Overview (Radio with CD)

A. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

B. Buttons 1−6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.



C. s © (Previous/Reverse)

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

D. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or offand adjusts the volume.

E. ¨\ (Next/Forward)

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

F. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites Page). Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

G. CD. Selects the CD player.

H. AUX (Auxiliary). Selects an external audio

source.

I. V /8 (Phone/Mute)

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

J. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

K. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

L. / BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

M. TUNE/MENU. Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,or set numeric values whilein a menu.

. Press to select menuitems.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

N. CONFIG (Configuration). Opens the settings menu.

O. INFO (Information). Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

P. Z (Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

Q. H (Clock)

. Opens the clock menu.

R. AS 1-2 (Autostore). Radio: Opens the auto

store stations list.



Overview (Radio with CDand Touchscreen)

Infotainment System Overview

The infotainment system in thevehicle is a touch screen system.It is controlled by touching thescreen buttons, the TUNE/MENUknob, preset buttons, and otherbuttons on the faceplate.

The TUNE/MENU knob can beturned and then pressed tocomplete any of the highlightedscreen functions.

The preset buttons can be pressedto select the appropriate screenbutton function as shown on thedisplay.

Overview (Radio with CD and Touchscreen)

A. HOME (Home Page). See “Home Page”

following in this section.

B. Buttons 1−6. The preset buttons

numbered one through sixcan be used to selectstored AM, FM, and XM(if equipped) stations.



C. s © (Previous/Reverse)

. Press to seek to thebeginning of the current orprevious track. If the trackhas been playing for lessthan five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longerthan five seconds, thecurrent track starts fromthe beginning.

. Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track.Release the button toreturn to playing speed.See CD Player onpage 7‑22 and MP3 onpage 7‑25 for moreinformation.

. For AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped), press to seek tothe previous strong station.

D. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Press to turn the systemon and off.

. Turn to adjust the volume.

E. ¨\ (Next/Forward)

. Press to seek the nexttrack.

. Press and hold to fastforward through a track.

. Release the button toreturn to playing speed.See CD Player onpage 7‑22 and MP3 onpage 7‑25 for moreinformation.

. For AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped), press to seek tothe next strong station.

F. FAV 1-2-3 (Favorites Page). Press to display the

current page numberabove the preset buttons.The stored stations foreach list display on thetouch-sensitive presetbuttons at the bottom ofthe screen. The number ofpreset FAV lists can bechanged in theConfiguration Menu.

G. SRCE (Source). Press to change the audio

sources such as AM-FMRadio, XM™ (if equipped),CD, and AUX.

H. p / j (Play/Pause). Press to start, pause, and

resume playback. See CDPlayer on page 7‑22 andMP3 on page 7‑25 formore information.

I. V /8 (Phone/Mute)

. See Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑31 or Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑30or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑35for more information.

J. CD Slot



K. TONE. Press to access the sound

menu screen to adjustbass, midrange, and treble.See AM-FM Radio onpage 7‑12 for moreinformation.

L. / BACK

. Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

. If on a page accesseddirectly by a faceplatebutton or Home Pagescreen button, pressing/ BACK will go to theprevious menu.

M. TUNE/MENU. Turn to highlight a feature.

Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

. Turn to manually changethe radio station.

N. CONFIG (Configuration). Press to adjust features

for radio, display, phone,vehicle, and time.

O. INFO (Information). Press to scroll through an

audio information screen.

P. Z (Eject)

. Press to eject a disc fromthe CD player. See CDPlayer on page 7‑22.

Q. H (Clock)

. Press to set the time.

R. AS 1-2 (Autostore)

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some screenbuttons highlight when active andgray out when inactive.

Home Page

The infotainment system displays ahome page that makes accessingmany of the features an easyprocess.

Back: If on page 2 of the HomePage, press Back to return to page1 of the Home Page. If on page 1,Back serves no function.

Home: While navigating throughother menus, press to go back tothe Home Page to start a differentfeature.

Fav: Press to display a page ofstored (favorite) AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped) stations. Keep pressingFav to scroll through the favoritepages.

Info: Press to toggle through anaudio information screen.

The Home Page Menu lists theoptions Customize Home Page andRestore Home Page Defaults.



Out of all available Home Pageicons, up to eight icons can beselected and sorted for the firstHome Page screen.

Home Page Features

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,USB/iPod, and AUX.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12,Satellite Radio on page 7‑17, andAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑26.

Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑31 or Bluetooth (Overview)on page 7‑30 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑35.

Press the Config screen button todisplay the Config main page. Fromthis display, you can adjust featuressuch as time and date, radio,Bluetooth, vehicle, and display.

Press the Tone screen button todisplay the Tone main page. Adjustthe tone and speakers by pressingthe screen buttons to change thelevels of sound for treble, midrange,bass, fade, and balance. SeeAM-FM Radio on page 7‑12.

Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑12.

Press the XM screen button (ifequipped) to display the XM mainpage and play the current or lasttuned XM channel. See AM-FMRadio on page 7‑12 and SatelliteRadio on page 7‑17.

Press the CD screen button todisplay the CD main page and playthe current or last CD trackselected. See CD Player onpage 7‑22.

Press the USB screen button todisplay the USB main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑26.

Press the AUX screen button toaccess any connected auxiliarydevice. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑26.



Time and Date Settings

From the Time and Date Settingsscreen button, press to display theTime and Date Settings menu.

Set Time: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

Set Date: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the day.

12/24 HR Format: Press the12 Hours screen button for standardtime; press the 24 Hours screenbutton for military time.

Set Date Format: Depending onthe region, the following dateformats may be available: MM/DD/YYYY, DD.MM.YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD.


Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the clock on the screenOn or Off.

Radio Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate to enter the menuoptions. Turn the TUNE/MENU knobor touch-tap the scroll bar to scrollthrough the available options. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob or pressRadio Settings to display the radiosettings menu. Press this feature tomake changes for radio informationdisplayed, preset pages, AutoVolume Control, and XM CategoriesRestore. See Satellite Radio onpage 7‑17 (if equipped), for moreinformation about XM Categories.

The Radio Settings are:

Speed Dependent Volume: SelectOFF, Low, Medium, or Highsensitivity to automatically adjustthe volume to minimize the effectsof unwanted background noise thatcan result from changing roadsurfaces, driving speeds, or openwindows. This feature works best at

lower volume settings wherebackground noise is typically louderthan the sound system volume.

Startup Volume: Press to set themaximum volume level for startupthat will be used even if a highervolume had been set when the radiowas turned off.

Radio Favorites: Press to selectthe number of FAV pages to beused in the system.

Add/Remove XM Categories:Press to customize which availableXM Categories are used anddisplayed in the system.

Phone Settings

See Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) on page 7‑31 or Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑30 orBluetooth (Voice Recognition) onpage 7‑35 in the “Phone” section formore information on phone settings.

Vehicle Settings

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30 for more information.



Display Settings

Press the Config button on theHome Page or the CONFIG buttonon the faceplate, then select DisplaySettings from the list.

The following options may display:

Dimming Mode: Press to changethe screen background. TheAutomatic setting adjusts thescreen background automaticallydepending on the exterior lightingconditions.

To change the overall brightnesssetting for the display, use thevehicle interior lighting instrumentpanel illumination control.

Languages

The vehicle supports English,French (Canadian), and Spanish.The default language is English.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the language. PressTUNE/MENU to change the displaylanguage.

English and Metric UnitConversion

To change the display units betweenEnglish and metric units, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑21.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch-Off

If the infotainment system hasbeen turned on after the ignition isturned off, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn toadjust the volume.

V /8 (Phone/Mute): Press tomute the infotainment system. PressV /8 again, or turn the O /VOLknob to cancel mute.

Menu System (Radio with CD)

The Menu system for the uplevelinfotainment system appears on thedisplay screen.

Controls

The TUNE/MENU knob and/ BACK are used to navigate themenu system.

TUNE/MENU:

Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.



Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

/ BACK:

Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right-hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toconfirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toturn the function on or off.



Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the character.

Press / BACK to delete the lastcharacter in the sequence or pressand hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the TUNE/MENUknob until the value changesto 0.

Press / BACK to go back to theTone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press / BACK to go back to theSystem Configuration menu.



Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM RadioFor vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

O /VOL (Power/Volume):. Press to turn the radio on or off.. Turn the knob to increase or

decrease the volume. Thevolume is adjusted for thecurrent audio source or voiceprompts.

RADIO/BAND (Radio with CDOnly): Press to turn the radio onand choose between AM, FM, andXM™, if equipped.



TUNE/MENU: Turn to navigate theavailable menus and to search forstations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

s © or ¨\ : Press to search forstations.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list and select thefavorites page.

Buttons 1−6: Press to selectpreset stations.

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Press to openthe autostore list.

SRCE (Source/Radio with CD andTouchscreen Only): Press toselect the AM, FM, or XM(if equipped) band.

The audio sources can also bechanged by using the steeringwheel controls. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑2 for moreinformation.

Radio Menus (Radio with CD)

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND button tochoose AM, FM, or XM, if equipped.The last station that was playingstarts playing again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly presss © or ¨\ toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holds © or ¨\ untilthe station on the display isreached, then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob toselect the frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.




Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores theRDS stations sorted by programtype in the FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe station lists are updated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FMStation List, if the stations storedin the station list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe TUNE/MENU knob.

Radio Menus (Radio with CDand Touchscreen)

Tone Menu

To access the sound menu, pressthe TONE button.

Use the sound menu to adjust thefollowing features:. Bass. Middle. Treble. EQ

. Fade

. Balance

Setting the Tone

To adjust the bass, treble, andmidrange:. Bass: Press Base and

then + or - to change the level.. Middle (Midrange): Press Middle

and then + or - to change thelevel.

. Treble: Press Treble andthen + or - to change the level.

Adjusting the Speakers

Scroll through the settings byturning the TUNE/MENU knob.Press this knob to select Fade orBalance.

To adjust the speaker fade:. Press F (Front) or R (Rear) to

change from the front or rearspeakers. Turn the TUNE/MENUknob for more sound from theleft or right speakers.



To adjust the speaker balance:. Press L (Left) or R (Right) to

change from the left or rightspeakers.

EQ Settings

EQ (Equalization): The EQsettings are selected through thesound menu. EQ provides a choiceof Manual or Talk. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to highlight. PressTUNE/MENU to select Manualor Talk.

Radio Settings

To access the Radio Settings menu:


2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob untilRadio Settings displays. Pressthe TUNE/MENU knob to displayother options within that feature.

Audio system settings or featurescan be customized for:. Audio Cue Options. Auto Volume

. Gracenote Options

. Startup Volume

. Number of Favorite Pages

. XM Categories

. RDS

. Software Version Menus

Audio Cue Options: Audio CueVolume: Press + or - or turn theTUNE/MENU knob to increase ordecrease the audio cue volume.

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to Onor Off to turn Audio Cues on or off.

Auto Volume: Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to select volume Off,Low, Medium, or High.

Gracenote Options: Press theTUNE/MENU knob to turnNormalization on or off.

Startup Volume: Press + or - orturn the TUNE/MENU knob toincrease or decrease theinfotainment startup volume.

Number of Favorite Pages: Turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to highlightthe number of favorites. Press theTUNE/MENU knob to select.

XM Categories: If equipped, turnthe TUNE/MENU knob to highlightthe category. Press the TUNE/MENU knob to select. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to Show all XMCategories to display all categories.

RDS: Press the TUNE/MENU knobto turn RDS on or off.

Software Version Menus: Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to highlight themenu. Press the TUNE/MENU knobto select software menu.

Finding a Station

Select a band such as AM, FM,or XM (if equipped).

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, press the correspondingpreset button.

See “Mixed-Band Presets” followingfor more information.



Seeking a Station

Presss © or ¨\ to search for astation.

Local Station List Search (Radiowith CD and Touchscreen)

To find a list of local stations in thecurrent AM or FM band, turn theTUNE/MENU knob. The radioperforms a search for availablestations.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. Each page can storesix preset stations. The presetswithin a page can be from differentradio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV 1-2-3 (favorites) button. Thecurrent page number displays abovethe preset buttons. The storedstations for each list display at thebottom of the screen. The number ofpreset FAV lists can be changed.

To store a radio station to afavorites page:

1. Press the RADIO/BAND orSRCE button until the desiredband is selected.

2. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tothe station.

3. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll the list.

4. Press and hold one of thepreset buttons for more thantwo seconds. The stationfrequency appears on the presetbutton at the bottom of thedisplay.

5. Repeat the steps for each presetin each page.

To recall a preset station from afavorites page:

1. Press the FAV 1-2-3 button toscroll to the page.

2. Press the preset button. Thestored preset station is recalled.

Autostore Stations

AS 1-2 (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press RADIO/BAND or SRCE toselect FM or AM.

2. Press AS 1-2 for at leasttwo seconds until a beepsounds. SEARCH displays onthe radio, followed by thenumber of stations found.

3. The radio will automatically storethe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS 1-2 button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function with XMradio stations.



Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features areavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, theradio can:. Seek to stations broadcasting

the selected type ofprogramming.

. Receive announcementsconcerning local and nationalemergencies.

. Display messages from radiostations.

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station couldbroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe current FM station, the stationname or call letters display on theaudio screen. RDS can provide aprogram type (PTY) for currentprogramming and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

Satellite RadioFor vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radiotuner and a valid XM Satellite Radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and in

digital-quality sound. A service feeis required to receive the XMservice. If XM service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display"No Subscription Please Renew" onchannel XM1. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

RADIO/BAND or SRCE (Source):Press to turn the radio on andchoose between AM, FM, and XM.

s © or ¨\ : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV 1-2-3: Press to open thefavorites list.

Buttons 1−6: Press to select afavorite.

TUNE/MENU: Turn to select achannel.



INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

w / j (Play/Pause): Press topause time shifted content,if equipped.

Selecting the XM Band

Press the RADIO/BAND or SRCEbutton to choose between AM, FM,and XM. The last channel played inthat band begins to play when thatband is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using thes © or ¨\ buttons,or the TUNE/MENU knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the TUNE/MENU knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusings © or ¨\, the TUNE/MENU knob, or the TUNE/MENUsystem.

Selecting a ChannelUsings © or ¨\. Press and releases © or ¨\

to go to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holds © or ¨\ toscroll through the previous ornext channel until the channel isreached.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE/MENU Knob

To select a channel using theTUNE/MENU knob:

1. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob andselect Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theTUNE/MENU System


2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.



Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV 1-2-3 button to opena favorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S., and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated. Noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight-digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.



Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integratedwith the rear window defogger,located in the rear window. Makesure that the inside surface of therear window is not scratched andthat the lines on the glass are notdamaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere withradio reception. For proper radioreception, the antenna connectorneeds to be properly attached to thepost on the glass.

If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the insiderear window can damage the rearwindow antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused toyour backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar,the XM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.



Audio Players

CD PlayerFor vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

The CD player can be used for CDsand MP3s.

With the ignition on, insert a CD intothe slot, label side up. The playerpulls it in and begins playing.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) forvideo to display.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,

the method of recording, the qualityof the music or video that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If a description label is needed, trylabeling the top of the disc using amarking pen.

Control Buttons(Radio with CD)

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to select the CD player.

s © or ¨\: Press to selecttracks or to rewind or fast forwardwithin a track.

INFO (Information): Press todisplay additional information aboutthe current track that may beavailable.

TUNE/MENU: Turn this knob todisplay the track list. Press to selectthe track from the list. The systemplays the selected track and returnsto the CD screen.

Control Buttons (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

A track number displays at thebeginning of each track. Song,Artist, and Album informationdisplays when available.

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

SRCE (Source): Press to selectthe CD player.

p / j (Play/Pause): Press to start,pause, or resume play.



s © (Previous/Reverse):. Seeks to the beginning of the

current or previous track.

‐ If the track has been playingfor less than five seconds, itseeks the previous track.

‐ If longer than five seconds, thecurrent track starts from thebeginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

¨\ (Next/Forward):. Seeks to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release toreturn to playing speed. Elapsedtime displays.

TUNE/MENU: Turn this knob todisplay the track list. Press to selectthe track from the list. The systemplays the selected track and returnsto the CD screen.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressZ.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD(Radio with CD)

Press the CD button if there is adisc in the player; it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holds © or ¨\ torewind or fast forward within thecurrent track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Presss © or ¨\ to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE/MENU knob.



Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists,Albums, Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Playing a CD or MP3 CD(Radio with CD andTouchscreen)

Press the TUNE/MENU knob todisplay the CD Menu.

Shuffle: Select to play the tracksrandomly rather than in sequence.Select again to stop shuffle.A checkmark indicates shuffle is on.

Track List: Select to display the listof tracks on the disc. Select thetrack from the list. The selectedtrack plays and the CD screendisplays.

Error Messages

If Disc Read Error displays and/orthe disc comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is not from a correct

region.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.



If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

For vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing a CD orMP3 CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Press to play thetracks randomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.



Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Auxiliary DevicesFor vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

The optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary jack or USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑9.

The AUX input/USB port is locatedin the center console.



A. USB Port

B. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) AuxiliaryInput Jack

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.

Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

Not all USB drives are compatiblewith the USB port. Check the heightof the USB drive prior to closing thearm rest.

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem:. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system. Devices arealso charged while plugged into theUSB port.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks that are found can besearched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audio Books. Composers





2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audio Books, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press the / BACK buttonto return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press the/ BACK button to return to the mainscreen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.



Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search feature totake some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.

Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag display asUnknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.



Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and delete

duplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

phone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Takingyour eyes off the road too long ortoo often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth-capable cellphone with a Hands-Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.



Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push to Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑9.

V /8 (Phone/Mute): Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressto mute the audio system.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Usethe O /VOL knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑9.



Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four-digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. PressV /8 once or twice,depending on the radio.

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the TUNE/MENU buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.



To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑9 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press TUNE/MENUto accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU todecline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Answer” and press TUNE/MENU toaccept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the TUNE/MENU knob to“Decline” and press TUNE/MENU todecline the call.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three-waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENU knob.

2. Select Enter Number or pressthe TUNE/MENU knob to selectEnter Number.



3. For Radio with CD only, enterthe character sequence thenselect Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑9 for moreinformation. For Radio with CDand Touchscreen, enter thenumber.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press TUNE/MENU andchoose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in-vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu-drivenphone system.

For Radio with CD:

1. Turn or press the TUNE/MENUknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑9 for more information.

For Radio with CD andTouchscreen:

1. Touch Enter Number.

2. Use the keypad to enter thenumber.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

For vehicles equipped with theMyLink or IntelliLink infotainmentsystem, see the separate MyLink/IntelliLink Features and FunctionsGuide for more information.

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features. Foradditional information say "Help"while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands-Free



Calling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in the

order that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four-digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter the

PIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”



Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands-Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands-Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.



To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands-FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:

1. Press b / g.The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all thestored numbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re-dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re-dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three-Way Calling

Three-way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three-way call.”



3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g , andthen say “Un-mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass-thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu-driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “DeletingName Tags.”

Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc. AllRights Reserved.



Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod and iPhone” meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, andiPod touch are trademarks of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Fees and Taxes — Subscriptionfee, taxes, one time activationfee, and other fees may apply.Subscription fee is consumer only.All fees and programming subject tochange. Subscriptions subject toCustomer Agreement available atwww.xmradio.com. XM™ serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada*.

*Canada — Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of XM™ SatelliteRadio. Explicit LanguageNotice — Channels with frequentexplicit language are indicated withan “XL” preceding the channelname. Channel blocking is availablefor XM Satellite Radio receivers bynotifying XM at:. USA Customers — Visit

www.xmradio.com or call1‐800‐929‐2100.

. Canadian Customers — Visitwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the XM™ SatelliteRadio System or that support the



XM website, the Online Service orany of its content. Furthermore, theAMBER voice compression softwareincluded in this product is protectedby intellectual property rightsincluding patent rights, copyrights,and trade secrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement from XM™is required for any product thatincorporates XM Technologyand/or for use of any of the XMmarks to be manufactured,distributed or marketed in theXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed and/or sold in Canada,a separate agreement isrequired with Canadian SatelliteRadio Inc. (operating as XMCanada).

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard inmusic recognition technologyand related content delivery.For more information, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and musicand video-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. One or morepatents owned by Gracenoteapply to this product and service.

See the Gracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of the GracenoteService, visit: www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.

Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.



Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enablesthis application to perform discand/or file identification andobtain music-related information,including name, artist, track, andtitle information (“Gracenote Data”)from online servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of theintended End-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agree thatyou will use Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agreenot to assign, copy, transfer ortransmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any thirdparty.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violate theserestrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to ceaseany and all use of the GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rights inGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the GracenoteServers, including all ownershiprights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. Formore information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.



Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, andnon-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote Software or anyGracenote Server. In no case willGracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with this system.

A. Temperature Control

B. Air Delivery Modes

C. Fan Control

D. Recirculation

E. Air Conditioning

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Defrost


8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Fan Control): Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Turn the knob completely to 0 toturn off the fan.

Temperature Control: Turn theknob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature setting.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Press[,Y , or X to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield, floor outlets, and sidewindow vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Pressto turn the air conditioning on or off.An indicator light comes on. If thefan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing,the air conditioning compressor willnot work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again it runs forabout five minutes beforeturning off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.



Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.


A. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

B. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

C. Air Delivery Modes

D. Heated Steering Wheel (IfEquipped)

E. Recirculation

F. Air Conditioning

G. Fan Controls

H. Rear Window Defogger

I. Defrost

J. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation. If the air delivery mode orfan setting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.



Manual Operation

9 (Fan Control): Press the lower9 button to decrease the fanspeed. Pressing the lower buttonlonger turns the fan and cooling off.Press the upper9 button toincrease the fan speed. Theselected fan speed is indicated by anumber on the display screen.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Air Delivery Modes: Press[,Y , or X to change the direction ofthe airflow. An indicator light comeson in the selected mode button.

Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

X (Defog): Air is directed to thewindshield, floor outlets, and sidewindow vents.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioningcompressor will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated to

quickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see "Climate and Air Quality"under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.



The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation; see“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑30. When auto rear defog isselected, the rear window defoggerturns on automatically when theinterior temperature is cold and theoutside temperature is about 4°C(40°F) and below. The auto reardefogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑17.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

M or L (Heated Seats, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated seats on or off. See HeatedFront Seats on page 3‑7.

( (Heated Steering Wheel, IfEquipped): Press to turn theheated steering wheel on or off.See Heated Steering Wheel onpage 5‑3.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.

The system will default to a heatingor cooling mode depending on theoutside temperature and then goback to the previous settings. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑8.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on topof the instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control systemuses the sensor information toadjust the temperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.



Air VentsUse the louvers located on the airvents to change the direction of theairflow.

Use the thumbwheels near the airvents to control the amount ofairflow or to shut off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Keep all outlets open whenever

possible for best systemperformance.

. Keep the paths under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-28Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-34

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-41Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-41California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-42Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-43Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction.Become familiar with the local lawsin your area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones orother electronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment sectionfor more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.



Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑10.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious— or evenfatal— collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐qaurters of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.



Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up,it can take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

Your vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times untilit stops, or it is held until it isstopped for an extended time,power steering assist should returnshortly after a few normal steeringmovements.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messageson page 5‑24.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve, while the front wheels arestraight.

. Adjust speed so you can drivethrough the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed.

. Wait until out of the curve beforeaccelerating gently into thestraightaway.



Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in the lane,or a child darts out from betweenparked cars and stops right in frontof you. These problems can beavoided by braking— if you canstop in time.

If you cannot fully stop, follow thesesuggestions:. Quickly apply the brakes to

remove as much speed aspossible from a collision.

. Steer around the problem, to theleft to right depending onavailable space.

. Straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels candrop off the edge of a road ontothe shoulder while driving.Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid mostskids by taking reasonable caresuited to existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road.

Learn to recognize warningclues — such as enough water,ice, or packed snow on theroad to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changescould cause the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous.Water can build up under thevehicle's tires so they actually rideon the water. This can happenif the road is wet enough and youare going fast enough. When thevehicle is hydroplaning, it has littleor no contact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.

. Have good tires with propertread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑36.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy,find a safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑31 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.



If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑58.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.

Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑71.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory‐installed options.



Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows the

number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑36 andTire Pressure on page 10‑44.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑50for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.



Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel, found on the vehiclecenter pillar (B-pillar), tells youthe gross weight capacity ofthe vehicle, called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or the

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle — like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in.But it will perform better in thelong run if you follow theseguidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Ignition Positions(Key Access)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑24.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral.This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto Neutral, continue to firmlyapply the brakes and steer thevehicle to a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop.Shift to P (Park) with anautomatic transmission,or Neutral with a manualtransmission. Turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑32.



{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut off whiledriving, turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key toACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesnot work, then the vehicle needsservice.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition.To move the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,push in the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This positioncan be used to operate theelectrical accessories, including theventilation fan and 12-volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights.This position can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

If the ignition becomes difficult toturn, see Keys on page 2‑2 for moreinformation.



Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9-volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10‑68.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes: ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.



The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF(No Indicator Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑24 for moreinformation.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displaya message. See TransmissionMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation. When the vehicle isshifted into P (Park), the ignitionsystem will switch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto Stopping the Engine/OFF.On vehicles with an automatictransmission, the shift lever mustbe in P (Park) to turn the ignitionswitch to the Stopping theEngine/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑32.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut off whiledriving, switch the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.



ACC/ACCESSORY (AmberIndicator Light): This modeallows you to use some electricalaccessories when the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.

ON/RUN/START (Green IndicatorLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the enginestarts. See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for more information.The ignition will then remain inON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off,and the brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to bedriven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.



Starting Procedure (Key Access)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,

cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.



Starting Procedure(Keyless Access)

1. If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the transmittermust be in the vehicle. Put yourfoot on the brake pedal andpush the START/STOP button.When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display a message.See Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑27.

If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter needsreplacing, the DIC will display amessage. The vehicle can stillbe driven. See Key and LockMessages on page 5‑27.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the START/STOP button is pressed, andthen released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START/STOPbutton a second time.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START/STOPbutton, for up to a maximumof 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key or button, and



the accelerator. If the vehiclestarts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently until theoil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater, if available, canhelp in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F) for easier startingand better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Plug in the heaterat least four hours before startingthe vehicle. An internal thermostatin the plug end of the cord willprevent engine heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The electricalcord is located on the passengerside of the engine compartment,near the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroofwill continue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will workwhen the key is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened or the key is removed fromthe ignition.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑46.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑32for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).


4. Remove the key.



Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly; then it is difficult toshift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of Park

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The shift lock controlsystem is designed to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock is always functionalexcept in the case of an unchargedor low voltage (less than 9‐volt)battery.



If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68.

If the shift lever cannot be movedout of P (Park):

1. Apply and maintain the regularbrakes.

2. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUNposition. See Ignition Positions(Key Access) on page 9‑16 orIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑18 for moreinformation.

3. Let up on the shift lever andmake sure the shift lever ispushed all the way into P (Park).

4. Press the shift lever button.

5. Move the shift lever into thedesired gear.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), consult yourdealer or a professional towingservice.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑26.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9‑24.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑46.



AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe shift lever to P (Park). SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑24.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as you



maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, seeIf the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.



Manual ModeDriver Shift Control (DSC)Notice: Driving with the engine ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), could damage the vehicle.Always upshift when necessarywhile using DSC.

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsyou to shift an automatictransmission similar to a manualtransmission. To use the DSCfeature:

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+)or (−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in the DIC.

While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this for sportdriving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm).

The transmission will notautomatically shift to the next lowergear if the engine rpm is too high,nor to the next higher gear when themaximum engine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has not shiftedgears.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑16.

If driving safely on a wet road andit becomes necessary to slam onthe brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,

there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

The vehicle has an Electric ParkingBrake (EPB). The switch for theEPB is in the center console. TheEPB can always be activated, evenif the ignition is off. To avoiddraining the battery, do not cycle theEPB too often without the enginerunning. The EPB can be leftapplied while the vehicle is parked.

The system has a parking brakestatus light and a parking brakewarning light. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑15.There are also Driver InformationCenter (DIC) messages. See BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑25for more information. In case ofinsufficient electrical power, the EPBcannot be applied or released.

Before leaving the vehicle, checkthe parking brake status light toensure the parking brake is applied.

EPB Apply

The EPB can be applied any timethe vehicle is stopped. The EPB isapplied by momentarily lifting up onthe EPB switch. Once fully applied,the parking brake status light will beon. While the brake is being applied,the status light will flash until fullapply is reached. If the light doesnot come on, or remains flashing,

you need to have the vehicleserviced. Do not drive the vehicle ifthe parking brake status light isflashing. See your dealer. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑15 for more information.

If the EPB is applied while thevehicle is in motion, a chime willsound, and a DIC message will bedisplayed. See Brake SystemMessages on page 5‑25. Thevehicle will decelerate as long asthe switch is held in the up position.Releasing the EPB switch duringthe deceleration will release theparking brake. If the switch is heldin the up position until the vehiclecomes to a stop, the EPB willremain applied.

If the parking brake status lightflashes continuously, the EPB isonly partially applied or released,or there is a problem with the EPB.A DIC message will be displayed.



See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑25. If this light flashescontinuously, release the EPB, andattempt to apply it again. If this lightcontinues to flash, do not drive thevehicle. See your dealer.

If the parking brake warning light ison, the EPB has detected an errorin another system and is operatingwith reduced functionality. To applythe EPB when this light is on, lift upon the EPB switch and hold it in theup position. Full application of theparking brake by the EPB systemmay take a longer period of timethan normal when this light is on.Continue to hold the switch until theparking brake status light remainson. If the parking brake warning lightis on, see your dealer.

If the EPB fails to apply, the rearwheels should be blocked toprevent vehicle movement.

EPB Release

To release the EPB, place theignition in the ON/RUN position,apply and hold the brake pedal, andpush down momentarily on the EPBswitch. If you attempt to releasethe EPB without the brake pedalapplied, a chime will sound, and aDIC message will be displayed.See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑25. The EPB is releasedwhen the parking brake status lightis off.

If the parking brake warning lightis on, the EPB has detected anerror in another system and isoperating with reduced functionality.To release the EPB when this lightis on, push down on the EPB switchand hold it in the down position.EPB release may take a longerperiod of time than normal when thislight is on. Continue to hold theswitch until the parking brake statuslight is off. If the light is on, see yourdealer.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Automatic EPB Release

The EPB will automatically release ifthe vehicle is running, placed intogear, and an attempt is made todrive away. Avoid rapid accelerationwhen the EPB is applied, topreserve parking brake lining life.

If you are towing a trailer andparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑46 for more information.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Some vehicles have a Hill StartAssist (HSA) feature, which may beuseful when the vehicle is stoppedon a grade. This feature is designedto prevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s), and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS is on whenever the vehicleis started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS can beturned off if needed.



TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, the appropriate messagewill be displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑28. When a message isdisplayed and d comes on andstays on, the vehicle is safe to drivebut the system is not operational.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph),see your dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCSis off. The vehicle's drivelinecould be damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

This button is located below theinfotainment system screen. TCScan be turned off by pressing andreleasing g.

TCS Off Light

When TCS is turned off, i comeson and the appropriate messagewill display on the DIC. The systemwill not limit wheel spin. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.



Press and release g again to turnthe system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑8 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press theappropriate cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑38.

Adding non-GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path, and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started.To assist with directional control ofthe vehicle, the system shouldalways be left on.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal.This is normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detectedwith StabiliTrak, the appropriatemessage will be displayed onthe DIC. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑28.



When this message is displayedand/or d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mi/h),see your dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

This button is located below theinfotainment system screen.

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing and holding guntil g and i come on in theinstrument panel and theappropriate message displays onthe DIC. When StabiliTrak is turned

off, the system will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicle orlimit wheel spin. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. Press andrelease g again to turn the systemback on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage.Press the appropriate cruise controlbutton to reengage when roadconditions allow. See Cruise Controlon page 9‑38 for more information.



Cruise ControlThe cruise control lets the vehiclemaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systemthat begins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑34 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑36. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.An indicator light will turn on or off inthe instrument cluster.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up to resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.



SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speedand activate cruise control or tomake the vehicle decelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

To set a speed:

1. Press 1 to turn cruisecontrol on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel downtoward SET/− and release it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory. Once thevehicle speed is about 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly and then release it. Thevehicle returns to the previously setspeed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, then release it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in very smallamounts, move the thumbwheeltoward SET/− briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.



Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow downto the previously set cruise controlspeed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal;

when cruise control disengages,the indicator light will not be lit.

. Press [.

. Press 1 to turn the cruisecontrol system off completely.The cruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressing 1or if the vehicle is turned off.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



The eighth digit of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) showsthe code letter or number thatidentifies the vehicle's engine.The VIN is at the top left of theinstrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) onpage 12‑1.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑43. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑41.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑42 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change,can help clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves.GM Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area.

We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissionscan contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopenta-dienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuelcontains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.



Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑41.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuels

website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations thatdo have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics of E85fuel make it unsuitable for use whentemperatures fall below −18°C(0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), it may take more timeto start the engine.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑44.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel.Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling thevehicle. This is against the law insome places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump;never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is behindthe fuel door on the vehicle'spassenger side. Turn the fuel capcounterclockwise to remove.Reinstall the cap by turning itclockwise until it clicks.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑73.



{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑13.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving

while towing a trailer, see“Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑71. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑71.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered by

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it isequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of the vehicle,see Trailer Towing on page 9‑50.Trailering changes handling,acceleration, braking, durability, andfuel economy. With the addedweight, the engine, transmission,wheel assemblies, and tires areforced to work harder and undergreater loads. The trailer also addswind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.



The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 mi)the new vehicle is driven.The engine or other partscould be damaged.

. During the first 800 km (500 mi)that a trailer is towed, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph)and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This reduces wear onthe vehicle.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. See ManualMode on page 9‑30 for moreinformation. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.

. Use the cruise control whentowing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than90 km/h (55 mph), to reducewear on the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tires,and mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.



Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do thisso the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot andno longer work well.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.



When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑16.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, butdo not shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑16.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used to pulla trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, andcargo in the tow vehicle must besubtracted from the maximum trailerweight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑4 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.



If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information.

The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10-15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitchthat does not attach to thebumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holesare not sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑26.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Some add-on electricalequipment can keep othercomponents from working asthey should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑29 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑29.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-11Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-16Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-20Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-26Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Rear CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-38Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Alignment andTire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-67

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-71Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Cleaning the CenterStack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications,is not covered under the terms ofthe vehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑29.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑29.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑14.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle. It is located inside thevehicle to the left of the steeringcolumn.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Go to the front of the vehicle andwith hand palm side down, slidethe secondary hood releasehandle toward the driver side ofthe vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and pull the proprod by the sleeve from theretainer, located above theradiator.

4. Securely place the hood propinto the slot on the underside ofthe hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop fromthe slot on the underside of thehood and return the prop to itsretainer. The prop rod must clickinto place when returning it tothe retainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 20 cm (8 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑11.

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑12.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See“Brake Fluid” under Brakes onpage 10‑17.

F. Battery on page 10‑20(Under Cover).

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑13.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68.

I. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑29.

J. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑16.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the Right EngineOil” in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accurate reading,the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the engine

has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark.This certification mark indicatesthat the oil has been approved tothe dexos1 specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W-30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification”earlier in this section for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos specification and displayingthe dexos certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑27. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 mi). It is possible that, if drivingunder the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oil

change is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so thatthe system can calculate thenext engine oil change.

To reset the system:


2. Press the DIC MENU button onthe turn signal lever to enterthe Vehicle Information Menu.Use the thumbwheel to scrollthrough the menu items until youreach REMAINING OIL LIFE.

3. Press the SET/CLR button toreset the oil life at 100%.


The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage is off and the REMAININGOIL LIFE 100% message isdisplayed.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.

The vehicle is not equippedwith a transmission fluid leveldipstick. There is a specialprocedure for checking andchanging the transmission fluid.Because this procedure is difficult,this should be done at the dealer.Contact the dealer for additionalinformation.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, andbe sure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Remove the six screws thatsecure the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.


10-12 Vehicle Care

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly.

5. Install the cover by lowering itover the filter and secure withthe screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air;it helps to stop flames if theengine backfires. Use cautionwhen working on the engineand do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there isa leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑16.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could gettoo hot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑16 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check tosee if coolant is visible in thecoolant surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is notat the indicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at the

coolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap,is cool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressurestill left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tankwith the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture to the indicatedlevel mark.


10-16 Vehicle Care

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven toa safe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, a significant loss in powerand engine performance will benoticed. The temperature gauge willindicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (mi)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature mayfall below freezing, use a fluid thathas sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters full whenit is very cold. This allowsfor fluid expansion iffreezing occurs, which coulddamage the tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes— for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder and,on manual transmission vehicles,the clutch hydraulic system usethe same reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir. The reservoir is filled withwith either DOT 3 or DOT 4 brakefluid as indicated on thereservoir cap.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the liningsare worn, there will be too muchfluid when new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on thebrake/clutch hydraulic system.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Checking Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch fluid can bechecked without taking off the capby looking at the brake/clutch fluidreservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brake/clutch hydraulic system checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system, make surethe level is above MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls toa low level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑15.

What to Add

If the vehicle has DOT 3 brakefluid, as indicated on the reservoircap, use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

If the vehicle has DOT 4 brake fluid,as indicated on the reservoir cap,use only new DOT 4 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. It isrecommended that the brake/clutchhydraulic system be flushed andrefilled with new DOT 4 fluid at aregular maintenance service everytwo years. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 andRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake/clutchfluid reservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-20 Vehicle Care

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑68 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.


Vehicle Care 10-21

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑32.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑13.

Notice: Allowing the wiper armto touch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper arm to touch thewindshield.


Vehicle Care 10-23

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector, andpull the wiper blade away fromthe arm connector.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑27.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps


A. Low-Beam Headlamp

B. High-Beam Headlamp

C. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp


10-24 Vehicle Care

High-Beam Headlamp/Low-Beam Headlamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. For the driver side bulb, removethe windshield washer bottlefiller neck by firmly pulling itstraight up and out of the bottle.

3. Remove the battery cover bypulling it straight up.

4. Remove the headlamp bulbaccess cover.

5. Turn the bulb counterclockwiseand pull straight back.

6. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb.

7. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

8. Reconnect the wiring harnessconnector.

9. Install the headlamp bulb accesscover.

10. For the driver side, reinstall thewindshield washer bottle fillerneck by firmly pushing itstraight into the bottle. Ensurethat the filler neck clip engagesinto the underhood electricalcenter retainer.

11. Reinstall the battery cover.

Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the parking/turn signallamp bulb socket from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pulling it straight out.

4. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

Fog LampsTo replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp locatedunder the front fascia.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lamp bulbassembly.

3. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

4. Install the new bulb by turning itclockwise into the assembly.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

Trunk Deck Inboard Taillampand Backup Lamp


A. Backup Lamp

B. Taillamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the push pins (A)retaining the trunk deck trimcover.

3. Rotate the hinge cover (C)rearward.

4. For the passenger side bulb,remove the pull handlefasteners (B) and pull handle.

5. Pull the trunk deck trim down farenough to gain access to thelamps.

6. Remove the bulb socket byturning counterclockwise.

7. Remove the bulb from thesocket by pulling straight out.

8. Install the new bulb in the bulbsocket.

9. Reverse Steps 1 through 7 toreinstall.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Stoplamp,Taillamp, and TurnSignal Lamp


A. Taillamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Stoplamp/Taillamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the push pins securingthe trunk trim.

3. Pull the trunk lining away fromthe taillamp assembly.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the rear taillamp assembly.

5. Pull the bulb straight out toremove it from the bulb socket.

6. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

7. Push the bulb socket straight inand turn it clockwise to lock itinto place.

8. Reinstall the trunk trim.

9. Reinstall the push pins.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

2. Turn the lamp assembly down toremove it from the fascia.


Vehicle Care 10-27

A. Bulb SocketB. BulbC. Lamp Assembly

3. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

4. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

5. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall it into the lamp assembly.

6. Turn the lamp assembly into thefascia engaging the clip sidefirst.

7. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921K

Deck Lid Taillamp 194

Fog Lamp H11 LL

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High‐BeamHeadlamp

H9LL

License Plate Lamp W5W LL

Low‐BeamHeadlamp

H11

Rear TurnSignal Lamp H21W

Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chance ofcircuit overload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motorcools, and the wiper control isturned off. After removal of theblockage, the wiper motor willrestart when the control is moved tothe desired operating position.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon aspossible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑29, Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑32, and RearCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑34.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To open the fuse block cover, pressthe clips at the front and back androtate the cover up to the side.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

A fuse puller is located in the enginecompartment fuse block.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

1 20AEngine ControlModule

2 10AOxygenSensor/PurgeSolenoid


10-30 Vehicle Care

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

3 15AIgnitionCoils/Injectors

4 15A Spare

5 – Empty

6a – Empty

6b 7.5AMirrorDefogger

7 5APowertrainCooling

8 7.5AMass Air FlowSensor/Pre O2Sensor

9 – Empty

10 5ABatteryPotentialSignal

11 7.5A Spare

12 – Empty

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

13 – Empty

14 – Empty

15 10AEngine ControlModule

17 10ATransmissionControl Module

22 10ALeftHigh-BeamHeadlamp

24 – Empty

25 – Empty

26 15AFront FogLamps

31 – Empty

32 5A Airbag

33 – Empty

34 7.5A Spare

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

35 5ADoor SwitchSupply/LeftPower Window

36 10A

AirConditioningCompressorClutch

37 10A Canister Vent

38 – Empty

39 20AFuel SystemControl Module

40 10AFrontWindshieldWasher

41 10ARightHigh-BeamHeadlamp

46 – Empty

47 15A Horn


Vehicle Care 10-31

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

49 20A Fuel Pump

50 – Empty

51 5AInside RearView Mirror

52 – Empty

53 10A

Ignition EngineControlModule/TransmissionControl Module

54 7.5A

InstrumentPanel Cluster/Fuel SystemControlModule/Heater,Ventilation,and AirConditioningRun/Crank

J-CaseFuses

Amps Usage

16 30AStarterControl

18 30ARear WindowDefogger

19 30AFront PowerWindow

20 30ARear PowerWindow

21 30A

AntilockBrakeSystemValves

23 – Empty

27 50A Spare

28 – Empty

29 30AElectricParkingBrake

J-CaseFuses

Amps Usage

30 60A

AntilockBrakeSystemPump

42 40AEngineCooling Fan

43 30A Front Wipers

44 – Empty

45 30AEngineCooling Fan

48 60A EngineCooling Fan

Relays Usage

1 Empty

2 Starter

3Engine ControlPowertrain


10-32 Vehicle Care

Relays Usage

4 Rear WindowDefogger

5 Empty

6 Empty

7 Spare

8 Empty

9 Spare

10EGR/CoolantPump/AIR SolenoidValve

11 Engine Cooling Fan



14 Run/Crank

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block ison the driver side of the instrumentpanel. To access the fuses:

1. Access the fuse block byopening the storagecompartment.

2. Pull straight down and out toremove the storagecompartment.

3. Remove the cover.

To reinstall the cover, line up theretainers and push into place.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses Amps Usage

1 2A Body ControlModule

2 20ABody ControlModule


4 20AInfotainmentSystem

5 10A

InformationDisplay/ParkingAssist

6 20AIgnition/ElectronicKey System

7 20A Power Outlet



Fuses Amps Usage

10 30A Body ControlModule

11 40A Interior Fan

12 25ADriverPower Seat

13 – Not Used

14 7.5ADiagnosticConnector

15 10A Airbag

16 10A

CentralLockingSystem/Tailgate

17 10AAirConditioningSystem

18 30AInfotainmentSystem


Fuses Amps Usage

20 5A PassengerPower Seat

21 7.5AInstrumentCluster

22 2A/5AIgnition/ElectronicKey System



25 – Not Used

26 – Not Used

Relays Usage

1 Trunk Open

2 Door Security

3 Power Outlet


10-34 Vehicle Care

Rear Compartment FuseBlock

The rear compartment fuse block,if equipped, is located on the leftside of the trunk behind a cover. The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F02 – Empty

F03 5ARear ParkAssist

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F04 – Empty

F06 – Empty

F07 10A Spare

F08 – Empty


Vehicle Care 10-35

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F09 – Empty

F10 – Empty

F11 – Empty

F13 – Empty

F14 – Empty

F15 – Empty

F16 – Empty

F17 – Empty

F18 – Empty

F19 7.5AHeatedSteeringWheel

F20 25A Sunroof

F21 25A Heated Seats

F22 – Empty

F24 – Empty

MiniFuses

Amps Usage

F25 5A Spare

F26 30A Spare

F28 – Empty

F30 – Empty

F31 30A Amplifier

J‐CaseFuses

Amps Usage

F1 – Empty

F5 – Empty

F12 – Empty

F23 – Empty

F27 30A Passive Entry

F29 – Empty

Relays Usage

R01 Empty

R02 Run

R03 Empty

R04 Empty

R05 Empty


10-36 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout anda serious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact— such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice covered roads isexpected. All season tires providegood overall performance on mostsurfaces, but they may not offerthe traction or the same level ofperformance as winter tires on snowor ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased tractionon snow and ice covered roads.With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availability andproper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑53.

If using snow tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P235/45R18size tires, they are classified aslow‐profile tires.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contactwith road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tireis molded into its sidewall.The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description.

See the “Tire Size” illustrationlater in this section for moredetail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are the

Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑55.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when a

regular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑67 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑58.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example ofa typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code:A letter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description:These characters represent theload index and speed ratingof the tire. The load indexrepresents the load carryingcapacity a tire is certified tocarry. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).


Vehicle Care 10-41

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread.Cords may be made from steelor other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑44.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall of atire signifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.

Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.


10-42 Vehicle Care

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted ona vehicle. The side of the tire

that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑44 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑52.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards): Atire information system thatprovides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑55.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air,can result in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures.The recommended pressureis the minimum air pressureneeded to support the vehicle'smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more. Do not forget thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The cold compactspare should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑67.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaning


Vehicle Care 10-45

the vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑46 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.


Vehicle Care 10-47

If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire may display in theDriver Information Center (DIC).The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message,if equipped, come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, it may bepossible to view the tire pressurelevels. For additional informationand details about the DIC operationand displays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑21.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑44.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition, but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑50, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑50, and Tires onpage 10‑36.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


10-48 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light,defined above, flashes for aboutone minute and then stays on forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.A DIC warning message may alsodisplay. The malfunction light andDIC warning message, if equipped,come on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause theseto come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message,if equipped, should go off afterthe road tire is replaced and the

sensor matching processis performed successfully.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfullyafter rotating the tires.The malfunction light and theDIC message, if equipped,should go off after successfullycompleting the sensor matchingprocess. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The malfunction light and theDIC message, if equipped,should go off when the TPMSsensors are installed and thesensor matching process isperformed successfully.See your dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑53.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message, if equipped,come on and stay on.


Vehicle Care 10-49

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to anew tire/wheel position after rotatingthe vehicle’s tires or replacing oneor more of the TPMS sensors.Also, the TPMS sensor matchingprocess should be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage, if equipped, shouldgo off at the next ignition cycle.The sensors are matched to thetire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure Menu Itemscreen.

5. Press and hold the SET/CLRbutton to begin the sensormatching process.

A message requestingacceptance of the process maydisplay.

6. If requested, press the SET/CLRbutton again to confirm theselection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.


10-50 Vehicle Care

10. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn soundstwo times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driverside rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process isno longer active. The TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.


13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km (7,500 mi).See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires assoon as possible and check thewheel alignment. Also checkfor damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑52 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑57.


Vehicle Care 10-51

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑46.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See“WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident.When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


10-52 Vehicle Care

When It Is Time forNew TiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one wayto tell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appearwhen the tires have only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) or less of tread remaining.

See Tire Inspection on page 10‑50and Tire Rotation on page 10‑50 formore information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typicallyneed to be replaced due to wearbefore they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle.Park a vehicle that will be stored forat least a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle.The original equipment tiresinstalled were designed tomeet General Motors TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control, andtire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Spec

number is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑38 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time.See Tire Inspection onpage 10‑50 and Tire Rotation onpage 10‑50 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.


10-54 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if

non‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10‑45.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, traction

control, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected.This increases the chance ofa crash and serious injury.Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑53 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality

Grading (UTQG) systemdoes not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions ona specified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life,and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment andTire BalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑58 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for the vehicle'stire size combination and roadconditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To avoid vehicle damage, driveslow and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used,install them on the front tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionas used in a skid. Stop pressingthe accelerator pedal and steerto straighten the vehicle.

It may be very bumpy and noisy.Gently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.


Vehicle Care 10-59

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire.To help prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tireand Tools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12.

2. Lift the load floor.

A. Retainer Nut

B. Tool Bag Tether

C. Tool Bag

D. Spare Tire

3. Turn the retainer nut (A)counterclockwise to remove it.Then remove the tool bagtether (B) from the stow rod, thetool bag (C) containing thewheel wrench and wheel blocks,and the spare tire (D).

4. Remove the jack, jack handleextension, and two-piecewrench, if equipped.

A. Hex Head Jack

B. Jack Handle Extension

C. Coin/Pierce Jack

D. Two-Piece Wrench

This vehicle may have one of thefollowing: A coin/pierce jack (C), ajack handle extension (B), and atwo-piece wrench (D), or a hex headjack (A) and two-piece wrench (D).


Vehicle Care 10-61

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.

If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down,as it could become scratched ordamaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑58 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once oneach wheel nut to loosen it.Do not remove them yet.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at the oppositecorner of the tire being changed.See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑58 for proper wheelblock placement.


10-62 Vehicle Care

5. Place the jack under the vehicle.

6. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

If you have a hex head jack,place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

7. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by anotch in the flange. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-63

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

Hex Head Jack Shown,Coin/Pierce Jack Similar

8. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise until it comesin contact with the notch in theflange.

Make sure the jack lift headnotch is placed in the flangenotch.

Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clear theground.


10-64 Vehicle Care

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by handuntil the wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrench

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-65

WARNING (Continued)

to the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

18. Remove the wheel blocks andreturn them to their properstorage location.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them withthe wheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Replace the wheel wrench andwheel blocks in the tool bag.

2. Remove the foam container fromthe rear storage compartment.

Coin/Pierce Jack Shown,Hex Head Jack Similar

3. Place the flat tire in the storagecompartment with the valvestem down.

4. Place the jack and jack handleextension, if the vehicle has one,in the foam container.

5. Place the foam container insidethe flat tire. Align the hole withthe stow rod.

6. Place the tool bag tether overthe stow rod and the tool bagrear of the flat tire.

7. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseuntil tight.

8. Replace the load floor.

The load floor may not lay flat.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and toolsto store the compact spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tire is correctlyinflated after installing the spare onthe vehicle. The compact spare isdesigned to perform well at speedsup to 105 km/h (65 mph) fordistances up to 5 000 km (3,000 mi),so a trip can be completed and thefull-size tire repaired or replacedwhen possible. However, thecompact spare tire will last longerand be in good shape if it isreplaced as soon as possible.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails.The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which candamage the tire, wheel, and otherparts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑20.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following stepsto do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start positive post (B) islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint (D) is the engine block oran engine mounting bolt.

Connect to a spot as far awayfrom the discharged battery aspossible.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

The positive jump start connectionis under a trim cover. Open thecover door to expose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑24.


Vehicle Care 10-69

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post (B).

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery (A).


10-70 Vehicle Care

7. Connect one end of the blacknegative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of the goodbattery (C).

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point (D).

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the covers over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should betowed with all four wheels offthe ground. Care must be takenwith vehicles that have lowground clearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home,see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”in this section.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far will the vehicle betowed? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Does the vehicle have theproper towing equipment?See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparingthe vehicle for a long trip,make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

The vehicle was not designed to betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used.See “Dolly Towing” later in thesection for more information.

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly.

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the gear shift lever inP (Park).

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Remove the key from theignition.

5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

6. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, tree

sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish.See your dealer for approvedcleaning products.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Protecting Exterior BrightMetal Parts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damage canbe caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosenthem or thaw them. Damaged wiperblades should be replaced. SeeWiper Blade Replacement onpage 10‑22 for more information.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. If the wiper motor overheats,the windshield wipers will stop untilthe motor cools and the wipercontrol is turned off. See ElectricalSystem Overload on page 10‑28 formore information.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft, clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surfacedamage, do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, trunkhinges and steel fuel door hingeunless the components are plastic.Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Note that newspapers or darkgarments that can transfer colorto home furnishings can alsopermanently transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly.

Never allow cleaners to remain onthe surface being cleaned forextended periods of time.

Cleaners may contain solventsthat can become concentrated inthe interior. Before using cleaners,read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. Whilecleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by opening thedoors and windows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.


Vehicle Care 10-77

. Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solutionwill leave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Fold the cleaning cloth toa clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.


10-78 Vehicle Care

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces after

cleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers.Do not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage causedby air fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Cleaning the CenterStack

Cleaning the Display

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfacescould scratch the glass. Use onlya soft cloth and do not spraycleaner directly on the system asit could affect the mechanicalparts.

Do not apply spray cleaner directlyto the system, the cleaner couldaffect the mechanical parts.

Do not wipe the panel with a hardcloth or use a volatile liquid such aspaint thinner, it could scratch thesurface or erase the characters onthe buttons.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals.Always check that the floor matsdo not interfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


10-80 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-14

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑41.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance workcan be dangerous and cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑50.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑16.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑10.

Tire Rotation andRequired Services Every12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑50.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑7 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑10.

. Check engine coolant level.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑13.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑16.



. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination and replaceworn or damaged blades. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑73.Replace wiper blades every20 000 km/12,000 mi or12 months. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑22.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑44.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑50.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑11.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑73.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑17.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components.See Exterior Care onpage 10‑73.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑20.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑21.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑21.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑22.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑20.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑12.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑12.

d) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricatechassis components every5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for itproperly may help to avoid futurecostly repairs. To maintainvehicle performance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if

they squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’ssystems and components.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 forGM approved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration,bounce/sway while braking,longer stopping distance,or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle lookinglike new, vehicle care productsare available from your dealer.For information on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑76 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑73.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1® specification, or equivalent,of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑13.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood, Door, and Trunk Lid HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 55560894 A3128C

Engine Oil Filter 12605566 PF457G

Spark Plugs 12620540 41–108

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 67.5 cm (26.6 in) 13348838 —

Passenger Side – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 13348836 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See“Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, located either in theglove box or the trunk area, has thefollowing information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System 5.5 L 5.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 4.7 L 5.0 qt

Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal

Transmission Fluid* 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 ft lb

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑11 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine K Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toBuick. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-521-7300. In Canada,contact General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centreat 1‐800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Buick, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal

dispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto



This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware ofits participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitration

of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).



Customer AssistanceOfficesBuick encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail Buick, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136www.Buick.com

1-800-521-73001-800-832-8425 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-252-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0818Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0818

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Buick has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Buick by dialing:1-800-832-8425. TTY users inCanada can dial 1‐800‐263-3830.



Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.)at buick.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage MyBuick/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Buick dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links:

Buick — www.buick.com

Buick Merchandise —www.buickmerchandise.com

Help Center —http://www.buick.com/help/faqs.html. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

Buick Owner Centre (Canada)buickowner.ca

Take a trip to the Buick OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.

. Locate owner resources suchas lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the Buick-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935.Text Telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1-800-252-1112; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Buick and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to an



owner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Buick dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck insand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is asix-request limit per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.



. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must beover 250 kilometers fromwhere the trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help you make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requireswarranty service, contact yourdealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advising theservice consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealercan help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in thework day as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orwarranties specific to e-Assist inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled“Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.



Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.



As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in theGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences inthe quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.



For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑24.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for therepair, but you must live with therepair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance companymay initially value the repairusing aftermarket parts.

Discuss this with the repairprofessional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember, if the vehicleis leased, you may be obligated tohave the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not paythe full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable inU.S. funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-521-7300, or write:

Buick Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33136Detroit, MI 48232-5136

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by anEDR, special equipment is required,and access to the vehicle or theEDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that havethe special equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crashor near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation manual for informationon stored data and for deletioninstructions.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link withany other GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.


14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistancein emergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the“Go” button on the navigationscreen to begin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go.For information about eNav,Destination Download, andcoverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can alsobe controlled from a cell phonethrough the OnStar mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds:“Call ended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds:”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device,an OnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle can beremote started, if equipped, or thedoors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System.If a diagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ , and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles.Not all OnStar services areavailable everywhere or on allvehicles. For more information,a full description of OnStarservices, system limitations, andOnStar terms and conditions,see www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service maynot work. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle.The available dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricingand sign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be promptedto change the PIN the first timewhen speaking with an Advisor.To change the OnStar PIN, callOnStar and provide the Advisorwith the current number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.


14-8 OnStar

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑52. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-11Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-20

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-28

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-25

Audio SystemBackglass Antenna . . . . . . . . . . .7-21Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-22Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-30, 7-31, 7-35BrakeSystem Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-15

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Bulb Replacement (cont'd)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-26Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-21

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-39

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46, 3-49Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36


INDEX i-3

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21


i-4 INDEX

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Electric Parking Brake Light . . . 5-16Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Cooling System Messages . . .5-26Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3

Engine (cont'd)Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-27Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . .10-11

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4


INDEX i-5

Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . .10-11Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45

Fuel (cont'd)Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-41Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41Requirements, California . . . . .9-41System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Rear Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6


i-6 INDEX

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-20

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7

Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-34Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-16, 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-38LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13


INDEX i-7

Lamps (cont'd)On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . .5-16Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Lights (cont'd)Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30MessagesAnti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-28Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-26Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-28Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30


i-8 INDEX

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

OOdometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-31Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23

Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-13

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-22

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-26Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-25Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-30, 7-31, 7-35

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-24Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18


INDEX i-9

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-17Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-31Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12


i-10 INDEX

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-16

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46, 3-49

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-14Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-20Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20


INDEX i-11

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-DeterrentSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-46

Tires (cont'd)Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-45Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-57When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-46Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-46Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-71Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-34Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17TrailerTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-22

2012 buick verano owner manual m - general …...see malfunction indicator lamp on page 5‑13. m....

Documents